دليل المستخدم

ManualsBrandsSamsung ManualsLED displaysS27D850T

ﻡﺪﺨﺘﺴﻤﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺩ

S27D850T

S32D850T

ﺭﺎﻌﺷﺇ ﻥﻭﺩ ﺮﻴﻴﻐﺘﻠﻟ ﺕﺎﻔﺻﺍﻮﻤﻟﺍ ﻊﻀﺨﺗﻭ ،ﺞﺘﻨﻤﻟﺍ ﻑﻼﺘﺧﺎﺑ ﺮﻬﻈﻤﻟﺍﻭ ﻥﻮﻠﻟﺍ ﻒﻠﺘﺨﻳ ﺪﻗ

ءﺍﺩﻷﺍ ﻦﻴﺴﺤﺗ ﺽﺮﻐﺑ ﻖﺒﺴﻣ.

BN46-00424A-05

Summary of content (108 pages)

PAGE 1
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫‪S27D850T‬‬ ‫‪S32D850T‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 2
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ‬ ‫‪23‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬ ‫‪23‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫‪24‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻃﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ‬ ‫‪26‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﻪ‬ ‫‪26‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪27‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ
PAGE 3
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪30‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪30‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪30‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫‪30‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ "ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪"DVI‬‬ ‫‪31‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ "ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪"DVI-HDMI‬‬ ‫‪32‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ "ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪"HDMI‬‬ ‫‪34‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪DP‬‬ ‫‪35‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ "ﺑﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ" ﺃﻭ "ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ"‬ ‫‪36‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‬ ‫‪37‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪38‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻛﻤﻮ ّﺯﻉ ‪USB‬‬ ‫‪38‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟ
PAGE 4
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ Brightness 42 Brightness ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 42 Contrast 43 Contrast ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 43 Sharpness 44 Sharpness ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 44 Game Mode 45 Game Mode ‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬ 45 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright 46 SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 46 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale 48 SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 48 Color 49 Color ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 49 HDMI Black Level 51 HDMI Black Level ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ 51 Response Time 52 Response Time ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 52 Image Size 53 Image Size ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ 53 H-Position & V-Position 55 V-Position ‫ ﺃﻭ‬H
PAGE 5
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ Language 69 Language ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ 69 Display Time 70 Display Time ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 70 Transparency 71 Transparency ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ 71 ECO 72 Eco Light Sensor 72 Eco Saving 75 Eco Icon Display 76 USB Super Charging 77 USB Super Charging ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 77 .DisplayPort Ver 79 .
PAGE 6
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪89‬‬ ‫‪Easy Setting Box‬‬ ‫‪89‬‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪90‬‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪91‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻤﻼء ‪Samsung‬‬ ‫‪91‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫‪91‬‬ ‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫‪91‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.
PAGE 7
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪© 2014 Samsung Electronics‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ‪ Samsung Electronics‬ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﻧﺸﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﻮﻳﺾ ﻣﻦ ‪.Samsung Electronics‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺘﻴﻦ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Microsoft Corporation‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳُﻌﺪ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ Microsoft‬ﻭ‪ Windows‬ﻋﻼﻣﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ ّ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺼﺎﻟﺢ ‪.
PAGE 8
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺥ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺇﻥ ﻟﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﺰﺍءﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.1‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺑﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﺒﺘﻠﺘﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪.3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﻈﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪.
PAGE 9
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪10 cm‬‬ ‫‪10 cm‬‬ ‫‪10 cm‬‬ ‫‪10 cm‬‬ ‫‪10 cm‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻤﻼء ‪ Samsung‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻳﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪) .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﻟﻠﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪(.
PAGE 10
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻔﺘﺢ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ(‪ .‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻃﻠﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻫﻠﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻮﻟﺘﻴﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻼﻣﺲ ﺃﻱ ﺟﺰء ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺒﻬﻚ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻄﺒﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 11
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻌﻴﺔ ﻋﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ً‬ ‫ﺳﻠﻜﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ً‬ ‫ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﻭﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺑﻴﺪﻳﻦ ﻣﺒﺘﻠﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 12
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻔﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺇﻻ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Samsung‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫!‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫!‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ٍ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪.
PAGE 13
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻬﺘﺰ )ﺭﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺁﻣﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻨﺤﺪﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ(‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻳﻨﻜﺴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺟﺴﺪﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ )ﻗﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﺎﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫!‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺳﺎﺧﻦ ﻛﺎﻟﻤﻮﻗﺪ‪.
PAGE 14
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻋﺘﻴﺎﺩﻳﺔ )ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺴﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻭﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍ ً‬ ‫ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻪ ً‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG‬‬ ‫!‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻤﻼء ‪ Samsung‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺟﻬﺪ ﻋﺎﻝ‪.
PAGE 15
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻪ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫!‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺴﺤﺐ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻛﺒﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻭﻋﻄﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻏﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪GAS‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.
PAGE 16
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻇﻼﻝ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫!‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻌﺘﺰﻡ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻨﻮﻱ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬ ‫)ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﺟﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ(‪.
PAGE 17
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺥ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫!‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﺤﺸﺮ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺪﻳﻬﻢ ﻭﺗﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻘﻮﻃﻪ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺟﺴﺪﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻀﻊ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻣًﺎ ﺛﻘﻴﻠﺔ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺟﺴﺪﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺫﻥ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺮﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺿﺮﺭ ﺑﺄﺫﻧﻴﻚ‪.
PAGE 18
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪1.1.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺎﺋﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﻳﺖ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ(‬ ‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ(‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻞ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪) DVI‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ(‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪) HDMI‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ(‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪) HDMI-DVI‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ(‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪) DP‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ(‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻞ ‪) USB 3.
PAGE 19
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1.2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬ ‫‪1.2.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻭﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪PIP/PBP‬‬ ‫‪SOURCE‬‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫‪PIP/PBP‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬ ‫‪SOURCE‬‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ‪ Eco Light Sensor‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻫﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )‪ (OSD‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‪.
PAGE 20
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ "ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ" ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ )‪ .(DisplayPort/HDMI/DVI‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫[‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ PIP/PBP‬ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 21
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪1.2.2‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺴﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻭﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ]‪ [POWER IN‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.DVI‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.HDMI‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.DP‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.
PAGE 22
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪ .USB‬ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB 3.0‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﻭ]‪2‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬﻳﻦ ]‪1‬‬ ‫[‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ‪.
PAGE 23
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1.3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬ ‫‪1.3.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ ﻭﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﻊ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ‬ ‫ٍ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻭﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﻊ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻭﺟﻬﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺩﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪ 90‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ‪.
PAGE 24
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪1.3.2‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻃﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻭﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪24‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺿﻊ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻭﺍﻗﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻭﺟﻬﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺳﺤﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤُﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪.
PAGE 25
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻃﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻃﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﻜﺘﺐ ﻫﻨﺎ‬ ‫‪B‬‬ ‫ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ )ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻱ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﻭﻳﻒ ﺑﺒﻌﻀﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻣﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻼﻭﻭﻅ ﺑﺪﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﺑﻄﻘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺎﺋﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﻗﻼﻭﻭﻅ ﻃﻮﻟﻪ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 26
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪1.3.3‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﻪ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻭﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫• ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺑﺄﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺑﺤﺮﺹ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1.3.4‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺘﺒﻌًﺎ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‪.
PAGE 27
‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪1.3.5‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺁﻣﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻭﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨّﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻟﻠﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻗﺔ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻭﺷﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺨﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 28
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1.4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫"‪"MagicRotation Auto‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ "‪ "MagicRotation Auto‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺸﻒ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪ً Windows‬‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ[‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﻠﻐﺔ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪(.
PAGE 29
‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪1.5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰﺍﺕ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪0°‬‬ ‫‪90°‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )‪ (OSD‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫‪PIP/PBP‬‬ ‫‪SOURCE‬‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫‪SOURCE‬‬ ‫‪PIP/PBP‬‬ ‫]ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ[‬ ‫‪29‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ "‪ "MagicRotation Auto‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .
PAGE 30
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪2.1.1‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻌﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﻭﻣﻮﺍﻗﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2.2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪.
PAGE 31
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫‪2.2.2‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ "ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪"DVI-HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪DVI IN‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ HDMI-DVI‬ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ]‪ [DVI IN‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.
PAGE 32
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫‪2.2.3‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ "ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪"HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪HDMI‬‬ ‫‪DVI ININ‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ]‪ [HDMI IN‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ HDMI‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.HDMI‬‬ ‫‪PC/AV Mode‬‬ ‫‪Select the PC/AV‬‬ ‫‪mode for the HDMI‬‬ ‫‪source.
PAGE 33
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫‪2.2.4‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪HDMI-DVI‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪HDMI IN‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ HDMI-DVI‬ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ]‪ [HDMI IN‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ DVI‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.HDMI‬‬ ‫‪PC/AV Mode‬‬ ‫‪Select the PC/AV‬‬ ‫‪mode for the HDMI‬‬ ‫‪source.
PAGE 34
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫‪2.2.5‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪DP‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪DP IN‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ]‪ [DP IN‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺛﻨﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.
PAGE 35
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫‪2.2.6‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ "ﺑﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ" ﺃﻭ "ﻣﻜﺒﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ"‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪AUDIO IN‬‬ ‫‪AUDIO OUT‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ]‪ [AUDIO IN‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ AUDIO OUT‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ]‪ [AUDIO OUT‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 36
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫‪2.2.7‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ]‪ [POWER IN‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪POWER IN‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.
PAGE 37
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫‪2.2.8‬‬ ‫‪37‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻜﻪ ﺑﻴﺪﻳﻚ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤُﺸﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺇﺑﻬﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺴﻚ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ ﻭﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ‪.
PAGE 38
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2.3‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﻮﺯﻉ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫‪2.3.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ ،USB‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﺿﻄﺮﺍﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﻮﺯﻉ ‪ ,USB‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪.USB‬‬ ‫ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑـ ]‬ ‫[ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪] USB‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.
PAGE 39
‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻮﻟﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.
PAGE 40
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2.4‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﺪﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤُﺜﻠﻰ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻌﻴﺒًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ Samsung‬ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ )‪ (http://www.samsung.com/‬ﻭﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪40‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ "‪.
PAGE 41
‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪2.5‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤُﺜﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤُﺜﻠﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺛﻢ ﻏﻴّﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤُﺜﻠﻰ‪.
PAGE 42
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻭﺻﻒ ﻣﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3.1‬‬ ‫‪Brightness‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪(100~0 :‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ SAMSUNG‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.Dynamic Contrast‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪MAGICBright‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ Eco Light Sensor‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Eco Saving‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.On‬‬ ‫‪3.1.
PAGE 43
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3.2‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Contrast‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪(100~0 :‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻹﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫‪ SAMSUNG‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Cinema‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Dynamic Contrast‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪MAGICBright‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪.Game Mode‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ PIP/PBP Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ On‬ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ‪ Size‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪3.2.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Contrast‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.
PAGE 44
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3.3‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Sharpness‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻬﺘﺎ ًﻧﺎ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪(100~0 :‬‬ ‫ﺟﻌﻞ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺰﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ SAMSUNG‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Cinema‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Dynamic Contrast‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪MAGICBright‬‬ ‫‪ SAMSUNG‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Mode1‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Mode2‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪MAGICUpscale‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪.Game Mode‬‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ‪ PIP/PBP Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.On‬‬ ‫‪3.3.
PAGE 45
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3.4‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Game Mode‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻤﺎﺭﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻣﺜﻞ ™‪ PlayStation‬ﺃﻭ ™‪.Xbox‬‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ‪ PIP/PBP Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.On‬‬ ‫‪3.4.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪Game Mode‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Picture‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 46
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3.5‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣُﺜﻠﻰ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪.Eco Light Sensor‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪.Game Mode‬‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ‪ PIP/PBP Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.On‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻔﻀﻠﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3.5.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪SAMSUNG MAGIC Bright‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 47
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪Set to an optimum‬‬ ‫‪picture quality suitable‬‬ ‫‪for the working‬‬ ‫‪environment.
PAGE 48
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3.6‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale‬‬ ‫‪ SAMSUNG‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪MAGICUpscale‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫‪ SAMSUNG‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Cinema‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Dynamic Contrast‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪MAGICBright‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪.Game Mode‬‬ ‫‪3.6.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪SAMSUNG MAGIC Upscale‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.
PAGE 49
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3.7‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Color‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻭﺻﻒ ﻣﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ SAMSUNG‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Cinema‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪MAGICBright‬‬ ‫‪.Dynamic Contrast‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪.Game Mode‬‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ‪ PIP/PBP Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.On‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Color‬‬ ‫‪3.7.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 50
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫▫‬ ‫‪ :Warm 2‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ً‬ ‫ﺩﻓﺌﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪.Warm 1‬‬ ‫▫‬ ‫‪ :Custom‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ DVI/HDMI/DP‬ﻭﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ PC/AV Mode‬ﺇﻟﻲ ‪ ،AV‬ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ‪ Color Tone‬ﻫﻲ )‪ Cool‬ﻭ‪ Normal‬ﻭ‪ Warm‬ﻭ‪.(Custom‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪50‬‬ ‫‪ :Gamma‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ ﻟﻠﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫▫‬ ‫‪Mode1‬‬ ‫▫‬ ‫‪Mode2‬‬ ‫▫‬ ‫‪Mode3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.
PAGE 51
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3.8‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪HDMI Black Level‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺃﻗﺮﺍﺹ ‪ DVD‬ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻚ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ( ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ HDMI Black Level‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪.HDMI Black Level‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ HDMI‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ‪ PIP/PBP Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.On‬‬ ‫‪3.8.
PAGE 52
‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪3.9‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Response Time‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ ﻭﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ‪ Response Time‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Standard‬ﺃﻭ ‪ Faster‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3.9.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Response Time‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Response Time‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 53
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4.1‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Image Size‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ PIP/PBP Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ On‬ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ‪ Size‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪4.1.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.(PBP‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪Image Size‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Image Size‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Screen‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 54
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪54‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫▫‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻞ ‪.DVI/HDMI/DP‬‬ ‫▫‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ )ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ 480p‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 576p‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 720p‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 1080p‬ﻭﺃﻥ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ٍ‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺩﻋﻢ ﻛﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ(‬ ‫▫‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺼﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ DVI/HDMI/DP‬ﻭﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬ ‫‪ PC/AV Mode‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.AV‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬ ‫[‪.
PAGE 55
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4.2‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪H-Position & V-Position‬‬ ‫‪ :H-Position‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :V-Position‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ Image Size‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ Screen Fit‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ AV‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ‪ 480P‬ﺃﻭ ‪576P‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ‪ 720P‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 1080P‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ AV‬ﻭﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ‪ Screen Fit‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ‪.0-6‬‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ‪ PIP/PBP Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.On‬‬ ‫‪4.2.
PAGE 56
‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪4.3‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪PIP/PBP‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪) PIP‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺰﺃﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻮﺍﻓﺬ ﻣﻀﻤّﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪) PBP‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺼﻔﻴﻦ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭﻳﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻭﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Windows7‬ﻭ‪.
PAGE 57
4 ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ PIP/PBP Mode ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ‬ 4.3.1 .‫ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬PIP/PBP ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ."‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ‬ .‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬ ] ‫ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬Screen ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ] ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ 2 ] ‫ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬PIP/PBP ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ] ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ 3 ] ‫ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬PIP/PBP Mode ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ] ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ .‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ 4 .‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ .‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ .
PAGE 58
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪4.3.2‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Size‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Screen‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ PIP/PBP‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Size‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 59
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪4.3.3‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Position‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Screen‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ PIP/PBP‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،Position‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Select the position of‬‬ ‫‪the sub-screen from‬‬ ‫‪the available options.
PAGE 60
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪4.3.4‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Sound Source‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺻﻮﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Screen‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ PIP/PBP‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،Sound Source‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 61
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Source‬‬ ‫‪4.3.5‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻛﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪PIP‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Screen‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ PIP/PBP‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،Source‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Select the source for‬‬ ‫‪each screen.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 62
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪PBP‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Screen‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ PIP/PBP‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،Source‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Select the source for‬‬ ‫‪each screen.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ )ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪Size) PBP‬‬ ‫((‪.
PAGE 63
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪4.3.6‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪Image Size‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪PIP‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Screen‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ PIP/PBP‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،Image Size‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 64
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪AV‬‬ ‫‪Select the image size‬‬ ‫‪for each screen.‬‬ ‫‪PIP/PBP‬‬ ‫‪PIP/PBP Mode‬‬ ‫‪2Q‬‬ ‫‪Size‬‬ ‫‪Position‬‬ ‫‪Sound Source‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪4:3‬‬ ‫‪Source‬‬ ‫‪16:9‬‬ ‫‪Image Size‬‬ ‫‪Screen Fit‬‬ ‫‪Contrast‬‬ ‫‪ :4:3‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ ،4:3‬ﻓﻬﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :16:9‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪.
PAGE 65
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪PBP‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Screen‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ PIP/PBP‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،Image Size‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Select the image size‬‬ ‫‪for each screen.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 66
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪AV‬‬ ‫‪Image Size‬‬ ‫‪Apply‬‬ ‫‪16:9‬‬ ‫‪16:9‬‬ ‫‪Cancel‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ :4:3‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ ،4:3‬ﻓﻬﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻤﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :16:9‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪.16:9‬‬ ‫‪ :Screen Fit‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻗﺘﻄﺎﻉ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻵﺗﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 67
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪4.3.7‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Contrast‬‬ ‫‪PIP‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Screen‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ PIP/PBP‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،Contrast‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Adjust the contrast‬‬ ‫‪level for each screen.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 68
‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪PBP‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Screen‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ PIP/PBP‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،Contrast‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Adjust the contrast‬‬ ‫‪level for each screen.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 69
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪5.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻭﺻﻒ ﻣﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Language‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻄﺮﺃ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5.1.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪Language‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 70
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪5.2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Display Time‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )‪ (OSD‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Display Time‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺧﺘﻔﺎء ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ "ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ" ﺑﻌﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5.2.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Display Time‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 71
‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪5.3‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Transparency‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺷﻔﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻧﻮﺍﻓﺬ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5.3.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ‪Transparency‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Options‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،Transparency‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 72
‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻭﺻﻒ ﻣﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ECO‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ Eco Light Sensor‬ﻭ‪ Eco Saving‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Eco Light Sensor‬‬ ‫‪6.1.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ‪ Eco Light Sensor‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻫﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ SAMSUNG‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.
PAGE 73
‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Sensitivity‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،Sensitivity‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Settings‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،ECO‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ECO‬‬ ‫‪Select the sensitivity‬‬ ‫‪of ECO light sensor.
PAGE 74
‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Brightness Level‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،Brightness Level‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Settings‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،ECO‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫‪Select the brightness‬‬ ‫‪level of ECO light‬‬ ‫‪sensor.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 75
‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪6.1.2‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Eco Saving‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ Eco Saving‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ SAMSUNG‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪.Dynamic Contrast‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ‪MAGICBright‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ‪.Game Mode‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪.Eco Light Sensor‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Eco Saving‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.
PAGE 76
‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪6.1.3‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Eco Icon Display‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Eco Icon Display‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Eco Icon Display‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Settings‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،ECO‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫‪Select the ECO Icon‬‬ ‫‪mode.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 77
‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6.2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪USB Super Charging‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺳﺮﻳﻌًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB 3.0‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ USB Super Charging‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ On‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫‪ USB Super Charging‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،Off‬ﺳﺘﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻴﺰﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫[‪ .‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫[ ﻭ]‪2‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬﻳﻦ ]‪1‬‬ ‫ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﺬ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻮﺫﺟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6.
PAGE 78
‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪78‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪ :Off‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ‪.USB Super Charging‬‬ ‫‪ :On‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺳﺮﻳﻌًﺎ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪.USB 3.0‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬ ‫[‪.
PAGE 79
‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6.3‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪.DisplayPort Ver‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻝ ‪.2‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻝ ‪ ،1‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ 1.2‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺑﺖ ٍ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪ 1.1‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺑﺖ ٍ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ DVI‬ﺃﻭ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (DisplayPort‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫‪ ،Check Signal Cable‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪) OSD‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ 1.1‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪.1.2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪.
PAGE 80
‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6.4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪PC/AV Mode‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ PC/AV Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .AV‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ُ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻄﺮﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ 16:9‬ﺃﻭ ‪.16:10‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ DVI‬ﺃﻭ ‪ HDMI‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (DisplayPort‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫‪ ،Check Signal Cable‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ] [ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪) OSD‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ PC‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪.AV‬‬ ‫‪6.4.
PAGE 81
‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪Select the PC/AV‬‬ ‫‪mode for the‬‬ ‫‪DisplayPort source.‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪PC/AV Mode‬‬ ‫‪PC‬‬ ‫‪DVI‬‬ ‫‪HDMI‬‬ ‫‪PC‬‬ ‫‪DisplayPort‬‬ ‫‪AV‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪81‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ PC‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ AV‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪.AV‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺇﻟﻰ‪ ،DVI‬ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫‪ PC/AV Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.
PAGE 82
‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6.5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Source Detection‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ‪.Source Detection‬‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ‪ PIP/PBP Mode‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.On‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Source Detection‬‬ ‫‪6.5.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Source Detection‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Settings‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 83
‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6.6‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Key Repeat Time‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Key Repeat Time‬‬ ‫‪6.6.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Key Repeat Time‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Settings‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪ECO‬‬ ‫‪USB Super Charging‬‬ ‫‪1.1‬‬ ‫‪83‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 84
‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6.7‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Off Timer‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Off Timer‬‬ ‫‪6.7.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Settings‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Off Timer‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،Off Timer‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 85
‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪6.7.2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪Turn Off After‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Settings‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Off Timer‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ Turn Off After‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Set the monitor to‬‬ ‫‪automatically turn off‬‬ ‫‪after a certain time‬‬ ‫‪period.
PAGE 86
‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪6.8‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Reset All‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺮﺟﺎء ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6.8.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ )‪(Reset All‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،Reset All‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ]‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 87
‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪7.1‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻭﺻﻒ ﻣﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Information‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪7.1.1‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ‪Information‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﻴﺔ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .Information‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪.
PAGE 88
‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪7.2‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪ Brightness‬ﻭ‪ Contrast‬ﻭ‪ Volume‬ﻣﻦ "ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ"‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ Brightness‬ﻭ‪ Contrast‬ﻭ‪ Volume‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‬ ‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪:Brightness‬‬ ‫‪ SAMSUNG‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.Dynamic Contrast‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪MAGICBright‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪.Eco Light Sensor‬‬ ‫‪: Contrast‬‬ ‫‪ SAMSUNG‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ Cinema‬ﺃﻭ ‪.
PAGE 89
‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪8.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪Easy Setting Box‬‬ ‫‪Easy Setting Box‬‬ ‫ﱢ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ "‪ "Easy Setting Box‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪8.1.1‬‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ "‪."Easy Setting Box‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ‪.
PAGE 90
‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪8.1.2‬‬ ‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﺑﺪﺃ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪/‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ "‪ "Easy Setting Box‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‪/‬ﺣﺬﻑ‪.
PAGE 91
‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪9.1‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻤﻼء ‪Samsung‬‬ ‫‪9.1.1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﻋﻤﻼء ‪ ،Samsung‬ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻼء ‪.Samsung‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺻﺪﻭﺭ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.
PAGE 92
‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ )ﻛﺒﻞ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ( ﻭﺃﻋﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻇﻼﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻴﺎﻝ ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺗﺮﺩﺩﻩ ﻳﻘﻌﺎﻥ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﻴﻦ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .
PAGE 93
‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪9.2‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﻮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺆﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻨﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ؟‬ ‫‪93‬‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺴﻖ‬ ‫‪ :Windows XP‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪ :Windows ME/2000‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.
PAGE 94
‫‪9‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻭﺣﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺆﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻨﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ؟‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﺃﻗﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ؟‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ :Windows XP‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ :Windows ME/2000‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ :Windows Vista‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﻔﺎء ﻃﺎﺑﻊ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﻭﺇﺿﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ :Windows 7‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﻭﺇﺿﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻊ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪.
PAGE 95
‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪ 10.1‬ﻋﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬ ‫‪ 27‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ )‪ 68‬ﺳﻢ(‬ ‫‪ 32‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ )‪ 81‬ﺳﻢ(‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪ 596.7‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺃﻓﻘﻲ( ×‬ ‫‪ 335.6‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺭﺃﺳﻲ(‬ ‫‪ 708.48‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺃﻓﻘﻲ( ×‬ ‫‪ 398.52‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺭﺃﺳﻲ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬ ‫‪ 0.2331‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺃﻓﻘﻲ( ×‬ ‫‪ 0.2331‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺭﺃﺳﻲ(‬ ‫‪ 0.27675‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﺃﻓﻘﻲ( ×‬ ‫‪ 0.
PAGE 96
‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪ 10.2‬ﻣﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪LED‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻤًﺎ ﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻭﺱ‪ .‬ﺟﺪﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺬﻛﺮ ﺃﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ ّ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻪ‪.
PAGE 97
‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫‪ 10.3‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳُﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤُﺜﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) CDT‬ﻣﻮّﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ( ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ .
PAGE 98
‫‪10‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‬ ‫)ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‬ ‫)ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬ ‫)ﻣﻴﺠﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬ ‫ﻗﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬ ‫)ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪/‬ﺭﺃﺳﻲ(‬ ‫‪1024 × 1280 :VESA‬‬ ‫‪79.976‬‬ ‫‪75.025‬‬ ‫‪135.000‬‬ ‫‪+/+‬‬ ‫‪900 × 1440 :VESA‬‬ ‫‪55.935‬‬ ‫‪59.887‬‬ ‫‪106.500‬‬ ‫‪+/-‬‬ ‫‪RB900 × 1600 :VESA‬‬ ‫‪60.000‬‬ ‫‪60.000‬‬ ‫‪108.000‬‬ ‫‪+/+‬‬ ‫‪1050 × 1680 :VESA‬‬ ‫‪65.290‬‬ ‫‪59.954‬‬ ‫‪146.250‬‬ ‫‪+/-‬‬ ‫‪1080 × 1920 :VESA‬‬ ‫‪67.500‬‬ ‫‪60.000‬‬ ‫‪148.
PAGE 99
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺴﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻢ‬ .‫ ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺮﻛﺰﺧﺪﻣﺔﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﺴﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ‬،‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺃﻳﺔﺍﺳﺘﻔﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﺞ‬ NORTH AMERICA http://www.samsung.com/us/ support 1-800-SAMSUNG(726-7864) U.S.A http://www.samsung.com/ca/ support (English) 1-800-SAMSUNG(726-7864) CANADA http://www.samsung.com/ca_fr/ support (French) LATIN AMERICA http://www.samsung.com/ar/support 0800-333-3733 ARGENTINE http://www.samsung.com/cl/support 800-10-7260 BOLIVIA http://www.samsung.
PAGE 100
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬ LATIN AMERICA 800-27919267 http://www.samsung.com/latin/ support (Spanish) HONDURAS 800-2791-9111 http://www.samsung.com/latin_en/ support (English) http://www.samsung.com/latin_en/ support (English) 1-800-234-7267 JAMAICA 1-800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) http://www.samsung.com/mx/ support 01-800-SAMSUNG(726-7864) MEXICO http://www.samsung.com/latin/ support (Spanish) 001-800-5077267 NICARAGUA 800-7267 PANAMA http://www.samsung.com/latin_en/ support (English) http://www.samsung.
PAGE 101
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬ EUROPE http://www.samsung.com/bg/ support 800 111 31, Безплатна телефонна линия BULGARIA http://www.samsung.com/hr/support 072 726 786 CROATIA http://www.samsung.com/gr/ support 8009 4000 only from landline, toll free CYPRUS http://www.samsung.com/cz/ support 800 - SAMSUNG (800-726786) CZECH Samsung Electronics Czech and Slovak, s.r.o. V Parku 2343/24, 148 00 Praha 4 http://www.samsung.com/dk/ support 70 70 19 70 DENMARK http://www.samsung.
PAGE 102
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬ EUROPE http://www.samsung.com/sk/ 0800 - SAMSUNG(0800-726 786) support http://www.samsung.com/si 080 697 267 SLOVAKIA SLOVENIA 090 726 786 http://www.samsung.com/es/ support 0034902172678 SPAIN http://www.samsung.com/se/ support 0771 726 7864 (SAMSUNG) SWEDEN http://www.samsung.com/ch/ support (German) 0800 726 78 64 (0800-SAMSUNG) SWITZERLAND 0330 SAMSUNG (7267864) UK http://www.samsung.com/ch_fr/ support (French) http://www.samsung.com/uk/ support CIS http://www.samsung.
PAGE 103
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬ CHINA http://www.samsung.com/cn/ support 400-810-5858 CHINA http://www.samsung.com/hk/ support (Chinese) (852) 3698 4698 HONG KONG 0800 333 MACAU http://www.samsung.com/au/ support 1300 362 603 AUSTRALIA http://www.samsung.com/id/support 021-56997777 INDONESIA http://www.samsung.com/jp/support 0120-363-905 JAPAN http://www.samsung.com/my/ support 1800-88-9999 MALAYSIA http://www.samsung.com/hk_en/ support (English) http://www.samsung.com/support S.E.
PAGE 104
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬ MENA http://www.samsung.com/n_africa/ support 021 36 11 00 ALGERIA http://www.samsung.com/ae/ support (English) 8000-GSAM (8000-4726) BAHRAIN http://www.samsung.com/eg/ support 08000-726786 EGYPT http://www.samsung.com/iran/ support 021-8255 IRAN http://www.samsung.com/Levant/ support (English) 0800-22273 JORDAN http://www.samsung.com/ae/ support (English) 183-CALL (183-2255) KUWAIT http://www.samsung.com/n_africa/ support 080 100 22 55 MOROCCO http://www.samsung.
PAGE 105
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬ AFRICA http://www.samsung.com/support 8007260000 BOTSWANA http://www.samsung.com/support 200 BURUNDI http://www.samsung.com/africa_fr/ support 7095-0077 CAMEROON http://www.samsung.com/africa_fr/ support 8000 0077 COTE D’lVOIRE http://www.samsung.com/support 499999 DRC http://www.samsung.com/africa_en/ support 0800-10077 GHANA 0302-200077 http://www.samsung.com/support 0800 545 545 KENYA http://www.samsung.com/support 847267864 / 827267864 MOZAMBIQUE http://www.
PAGE 106
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺆﻭﻟﻴﺔ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻓﻊ )ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﺤﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻼء(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻧﺤﺼﻞ ﻣﻨﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﺳﻮﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻴﻴﻦ ﻓﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻻ ﻳﺰﺍﻝ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻨﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.
PAGE 107
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪) OSD‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‬ ‫ﺗُﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )‪ (OSD‬ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗُﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺯﻉ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺻﻼﺕ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﺎﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ Gamma‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .
PAGE 108
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮّﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ 768 × 1366‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 1366‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ( ﻭ ‪ 768‬ﺧﻂ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ )ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ 1080 × 1920‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 1920‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ( ﻭ ‪ 1080‬ﺧﻂ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ )ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ(‪.